Nikon Z 7 دليل مرجعي (التعليمات الكاملة)

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﻷﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(xvi‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.html‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪nikon‬‬ ‫‪Z6‬‬ ‫‪https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z7_z6/ar/‬‬ ‫‪Z 7 Model Name: N1710‬‬ ‫‪Z 6 Model Name: N1711‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(pdf‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪.WT-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ nikon‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪Z 7‬‬ ‫‪Z6‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪BF-N1‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) DK-29‬ﺗﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(413 0 ،‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻣﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) MH-25a‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ(‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪AN-DC19‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪EH-7P‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫)ﻟـ ‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﹸﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ—‪(29 0‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(415 0) HDMI/USB‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪UC-E24‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪(414 0) BS-1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺃﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺩ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﹸﻮﻓﱠﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/‬‬ ‫‪ii‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﹸﻣﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Z 7‬ﻭ‪ .Z 6‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫»ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ«؛ ﻭﻏﺎﻟ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ »ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ«‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺏ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ"‬ ‫)‪.(xvi 0‬‬ ‫‪iii‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪ii ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ‪xvi..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪xx ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪1 .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪5 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪6 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪8 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪8 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪8 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪10 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪15 ............................................................................................................................... DISP‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪17 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪17 ............................................................................................................................ AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪17 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪18 .............................................................................................................................G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪21 ....................................................................................................................(i‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪24 ...................................................................................................(Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﹼﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪27 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪28 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪28 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪29 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪32 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪36 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪38 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪iv‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪41 ......................................................................... (b‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪45 ....................................................................................................(b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪49 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪49 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪51 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪52 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪52 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪54 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪57 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪59 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪61 .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪65 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪66 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪67 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪68 ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪69 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪69 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪70 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪70 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪72 ................................................................... U3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪75 ................................................................... (M‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) S‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 .................................................................................................. (ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪78 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪79 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪81 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪84 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪86 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪86 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪86 ..........................................................................(AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪86 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪89 ............................................................................................................ i‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪90 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91 ......................................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪96 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪102 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪104 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪105 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪106 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪107 ..................................................................................................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪108 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪109 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪110 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪111 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪111 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪112 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪113 ...................................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪113 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪114 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪116 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪117 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪118 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪118 ..................................................................................................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪118 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪118 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪119 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪119 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪119 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪vi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪120 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪120 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪121 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪122 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :i‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪130 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪132 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪133 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪136 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪137 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‪138 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪138 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪139 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪141‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪141 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪152 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪153 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪153 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪153 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪154 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪154 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪155 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‪155 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪156 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪157 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪vii‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪158 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪159 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪159 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪163 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪163 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪164 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪166 .......................................................................................... NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪167 ...................................................................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪168 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪175 ..........................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪177 .............................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪180 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪180 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪181 .................................................................................... NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‪181 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪182 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪182 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪182 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪183 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪183 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪184 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪186 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪187 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪187 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪187 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪187 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪188 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪198 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ‪205 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ‪210 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ‪221 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪229 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ‪235 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪viii‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪236 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪237 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪237 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪237 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪237 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪237 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪238 ...................................................................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪238 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪239 ..........................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪239 .............................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪239 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‪239 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪240 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪240 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪240 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪240 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪241 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪241 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪241 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪241 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪241 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪242 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‪242 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪243 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪243 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪243 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪244 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ix‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪245 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪248 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪249 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪249 .......................................................................................AF-C‬‬ ‫‪ :a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪249 ....................................................................................... AF-S‬‬ ‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪250 .................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪250 ...............................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a5‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪250 .............................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a6‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪251 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a7‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪252 .................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪252 ........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a9‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪253 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a10‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪253 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a11‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪253 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a12‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪254 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a13‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪254 ...............................................AF‬‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪255 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪255 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b2‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪255 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b3‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪256 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b4‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪256 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :c‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪257 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪257 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪257 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪258 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪259 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪259 ...............................................................................CL‬‬ ‫‪ :d2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪259 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪259 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪260 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d5‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪260 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪260 ..................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪261 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪262 ....................................................‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪ :d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪262 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d10‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪262 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d11‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪262 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪263 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪263 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪264 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪264 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪264 .........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪265 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪265 .........................................................................(M‬‬ ‫‪ :e7‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪266 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪267 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪267 ...................................................................................... i‬‬ ‫‪ :f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪269 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪277 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪279 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f5‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪279 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f6‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪281 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ‪281 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪282 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪282 .....................................................................................i‬‬ ‫‪ :g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪283 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪288 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪288 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g5‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪289 ...............................................‬‬ ‫‪ :g6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪290 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪291 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪292 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪292 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪292 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪292 .............................................................................................. (Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪293 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪293 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪294 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪xi‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪295 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪295 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪295 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪296 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪296 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪297 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪298 .................................................................................................CPU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪298 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪299 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪301 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪302 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ‪303 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪303 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪304 .....................................................................................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪304 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪305 .......................................................(WR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ‪306 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪306 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪306 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪307 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪307 ............................................................................(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪307 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪308 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪308 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪309 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪311 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪311 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ‪312 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪315 .......................................................................................... NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪318 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪319 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪321 ........................................................................................................... D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪321 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪322 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪xii‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪322 ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‪323 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪324 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪327 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪327 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪329 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪334‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ‪334 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪335 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪335 ......................................................................................................... USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪339 .....................................................................................(Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪340 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪341 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪342 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪343 ................................................................................................... HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪344 ........................................................................................................... HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪347‬‬ ‫"ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ "ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ"‪347 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪347 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪347 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪348 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪352 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪354 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪355 ....................................................................................................FV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪357 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪xiii‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪360‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪360 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪362 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪362 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪366 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪372 ......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪373 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪373 ..........................................SB-500‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪381 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪382 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫‪385‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ‪386 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪386 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪387 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪389 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪391 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪391 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ‪392 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪392 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪394 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪xiv‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪396‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪396 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪396 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪401 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪402 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪404 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪405 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪406 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪411 ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪416 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪418 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪418 ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪418 ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪419 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪422 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪424 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪429 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪444 .................................................NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪453 ......................................................................... FTZ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪460 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪461 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪463 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪464 ................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪xv‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻜﺸﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xvi‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺮ ﹼ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻀﻤﺔ ﺻﻘﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺮﻳﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xvii‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺼﺮ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻼﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xviii‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﺸﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺰﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺰﻝ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﺸﻄﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻬﻴﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xix‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺬﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xx‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺗﻴﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺍﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "ﻋﻴﻨﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺍﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺻﻜﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﺍﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪xxi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺤﺮﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪-‬ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺷﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ" ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪https://www.nikonusa.com/ :‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/ :‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://www.nikon-asia.com/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻺﻟﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ )‪ ،(FAQs‬ﻭﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪https://imaging.nikon.com/ :‬‬ ‫‪xxii‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪68 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪27 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪68 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪116...................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪45 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪41 ،38 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪41 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪79 .............................................................E‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪77 ........................................................S‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ )‪60 .................. (E‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪279 ،17 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪396 ،295 ،5 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪414 ،406 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪419....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪296 ،8 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪254 ،43 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪352 ،105 ......‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪84 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪36 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪243..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪29 ....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪415 ،411 ،335 ...........................USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪415 ،411 ،343 .........................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪411.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪411.....................‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ‪411 ،36 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )‪.(419 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪8 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪402 ،8 ،6..................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪413...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺯﺭ ‪49 ............................................................K‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ‪51 ..............................................................O‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪396 ،293 ،57 ،10 ،6 ...........................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪8 .....................‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪122 ،15 ................................................ DISP‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪45 ،41 .......................‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺯﺭ ‪17 .......................................................AF-ON‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪86 ،17 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪282 ،267 ،130 ،89 ،21............................i‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪32 ......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪83 ،33 ......‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪288 ،277 ،18.......................................... J‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪18 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪141 ،18 .............................................. G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪81 ...................................................(E) c‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪121 ،120 ،20.................................(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪137 ،120 ،59........................................... X‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ 6 279 ،17 ............................‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪36 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 7 283 ،269 ،61 ،24 .................................. Fn1‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪37 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 8 283 ،269 ،52 ،24 .................................. Fn2‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ 9 32 ...................‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪75 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ 10 32 ..............................‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪416...............................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(405 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪5 70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪6 34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪81 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(396 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9‬‬ ‫‪23456 7 89‬‬ ‫‪21 24 22‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17 16 15‬‬ ‫‪19 18 13 17 16 15 14‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪11 68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪12 54 ،42 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪13 109 ،81 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪241 ،187 ،52.................‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪241 ،187 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪15 239 ،180 ،108 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪16 239 ،175 ،91..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪17 238 ،168 ،96 ،61 ......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪237 ،163 ،117 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،104 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪20 1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،102 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪21 ،13 ..................................................i‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪71 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪79 .............‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪78 ...................‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ 22 70 ........................................................‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪187 ،110 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ 23 70 ،69 .......................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪57 ،10 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ 24 241 ،183 ،106 ..................................‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"‪40 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 6 45 ........................................‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪56 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 7 46 ......................................‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪116........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪ 8 45 ..........................................‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪242 ،116 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪243.................................‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪،114‬‬ ‫‪...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪54 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪81 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ؛ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.(57 0) W‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .(1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪.(89 ،21 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪13‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺼﻨﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻇﺎﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(303 0‬‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪3 ،2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-400‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-300‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪15‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(87 ،86 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ :D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪152...................................‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪158........................‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪236.........................‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪245..............‬‬ ‫‪ :B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪291.......................................‬‬ ‫‪ :N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪312..................................‬‬ ‫‪ :O/m‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪329..............‬‬ ‫‪ :d‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪20 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪141.........................................‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ :J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫‪ :2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ :4‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ :3‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪19‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪.(14 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) d‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ d‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(Q) W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪(i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (90 0‬ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(112 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪21‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(i‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪.f1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 22‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫• ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫• ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫• ‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫• ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(i‬؛‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪23‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪(Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪.f2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) J‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،Fn1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪25‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• )‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫• ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ ﺽ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ • ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ • ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫• ‪ c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪CPU‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪g2‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 26‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﹼﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ‪ Z 7‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟـ ‪.(Z 6‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺏ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (xvi 0‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ" )‪.(424 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ .(q‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )‪ (w‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ° 90‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪ .(e‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15a‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪EN-EL15‬؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ .(MH-25a‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﹸﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛ ﱢﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪.(32 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪29‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ .(q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪33‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ K‬ﺛﻢ ‪ J‬ﺛﻢ ‪ I‬ﻭﺃﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ ‪ .H‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،H‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺑﱢﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،H‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺌﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1400‬ﻭ ‪ 1499‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(K 1.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 34‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻬﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]–‪ [–E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .Z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .OFF‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪.NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 36‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) FTZ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ (453 0 ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .F‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ F‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 2‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) J‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 38‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪39‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪") t‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"(‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﹸﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻳﻜﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )‪.(293 0‬‬ ‫‪SnapBridge A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 40‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.C‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪41‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺻﺪﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 42‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ؛ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪43‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( <‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 44‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪45‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 46‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﹸﺴ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ m‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 50‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ ﻭﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻤﻮﺝ ﻭﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﱠﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺤﻈﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪47‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،C‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ .1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪ 2 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪×2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪×16‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .(i‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ X‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ" )‪.(49 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(241 ،187 ،111 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ Fn2‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ؛ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ AF-S‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺽ ﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 52‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ AF-F‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪MF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ )‪ .(59 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻓﺘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ )ﻧﺠﻤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﺧﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺄﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺎﺏ(‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﱠﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AF-S‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a11‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪53‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪،187 ،111 0‬‬ ‫‪.(241‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 54‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﹸﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫‪ h‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )‪(56 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a5‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ((‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪55‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﺍﻑ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 56‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :W‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ؛‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :V‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :X‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪57‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 58‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪59‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (E‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d10‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪ (j‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪.(238 ،168 ،96 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪61‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ -3500‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 8000‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-4500‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪8000‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪5200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺒﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6000‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪8000‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫‪3000‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻬﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪2700‬‬ ‫‪3000‬‬ ‫‪3700‬‬ ‫‪4200‬‬ ‫‪5000‬‬ ‫‪6500‬‬ ‫‪7200‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪5400‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ؛ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 62‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪-2500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،(0 99 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪") 4 A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪") D D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"(‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪4‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪63‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(97 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺘﺴﺒﻬﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ K 5500-5000‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺃﺑﺮﺩ" )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﺭﻗﺔ(‬ ‫] ‪10000 [ K‬‬ ‫‪8000‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺃﺩﻓﺄ" )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭﹰﺍ(‬ ‫‪6000‬‬ ‫‪5000‬‬ ‫‪4000‬‬ ‫‪3000‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤ ﹰﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻑﺀ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ"‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(82 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ ﻭﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻤﻮﺝ ﻭﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻮﻫﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺻﺎﻋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﺎﻃﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪65‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻭ‪،ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ d‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 66‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪P‬؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 3-2‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪67‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪.(45 ،41 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ‪ M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻓﺘﺢ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ :U3‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 68‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ"(‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )‪ .(U‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "×200‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪1/8000‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ )‪.(279 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪69‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪.(279 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "×200‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )‪ .(75 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 70‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EV 1/2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ b1‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ"‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪EV 1/3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪EV 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(78 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪U3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(P‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 72‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.P‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪73‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ‪.U3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 74‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 35‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪f/25 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﱢﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺼﺢ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ( ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪ NR‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪75‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 76‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) S‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 64‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Z 6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،(ISO 51200‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 2‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ b‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) ISO-A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ(‪ .‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﻭ ‪.Hi 2‬‬ ‫‪Hi 2–Hi 0.3 D‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Hi 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV 2–0.3‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 32000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Z 6) 64000‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Hi 2‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫‪ (Z 7) ISO 102400‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(Z 6) 204800‬‬ ‫‪Lo 1–Lo 0.3 D‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV 1–0.3‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Z 6) 80‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ISO 32‬‬ ‫)‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(Z 6) 50‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﹸﻨﺼﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪77‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻛﺜﻴﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (Z 6) 200‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ Hi 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪< ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ ISO AUTO‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .ISO-A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪e1‬‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 78‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) EV −5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪EV +5‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EV −1‬‬ ‫‪EV +1‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪79‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،±0.0‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .±0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 80‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ" ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (E) c‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 5-1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪81‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫)ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ .(Z 6‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺛﺎﺑ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪.(84 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪TIFF/JPEG‬‬ ‫)‪/NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪TIFF/JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫)‪/NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪TIFF/JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫)ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫)‪/NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ 82‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.5 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.5 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.5 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ 5 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 3.5 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.5 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 4 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪ 9 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 12 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 12 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ 8 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 9 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6.5 :Z 7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8 :Z 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )‪ .(r00‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﹸﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ .(45 0‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 50‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺤ ﹴﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﳌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ )‪ (Z 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(E) c‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪) E‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ 84‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(54 0‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 86‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.(AE-L‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪87‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AF-S D‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ( ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 88‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) i‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(i‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) J‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ؛ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﱟ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪89 i‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ 90‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 91 ................ Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪108..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 96 ...............................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪109.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 102.............................................‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪110...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 11 104............................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪111...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪105.............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ 12 106........................................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪111.................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪107.............................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ T‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺠﺎ ﻓﺮﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ Creative Picture‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﻞﹲ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪) Control –k01‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺗﻦ ﻭﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺪ ﻭﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻭﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪ k20‬ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺌﻴﺐ ﻭﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺤﻤﻲ ﻭﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ ﻭﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪91 i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(93 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 92‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ .Control‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪0.25‬؛ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.O‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .i‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪.("U‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ j‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪،Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ A-2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.A+2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪93 i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Creative Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ A‬ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺼﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﹸﺳﻤﻜﹰﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺈﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻳﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) B&W‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) "A" D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 94‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫‪) O‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪95 i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‪.(61 0 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻬﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 96‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("U‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪97 i‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–‬ ‫)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .i‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("U‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 98‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.i‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﹸ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (r‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪99 i‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪ r‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ < ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪،K 5200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪101 i‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ "ﺟﻴﺪ" ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫"ﻋﺎﺩﻱ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ"‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ TIFF-RGB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ 24‬ﺑﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 102‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪NEF (RAW) A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪) NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "*‪ (".nef‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻭ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑـ "ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪."NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Capture NX-D‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪103 i‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ TIFF/JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.TIFF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪:Z 7‬‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪(30×24) 5:4‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪5504 × 8256‬‬ ‫‪3600 × 5408‬‬ ‫‪5504 × 6880‬‬ ‫‪5504 × 5504‬‬ ‫‪4640 × 8256‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪4128 × 6192‬‬ ‫‪2696 × 4048‬‬ ‫‪4120 × 5152‬‬ ‫‪4128 × 4128‬‬ ‫‪3480 × 6192‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪2752 × 4128‬‬ ‫‪1800 × 2704‬‬ ‫‪2752 × 3440‬‬ ‫‪2752 × 2752‬‬ ‫‪2320 × 4128‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪4024 × 6048‬‬ ‫‪2624 × 3936‬‬ ‫‪4016 × 4016‬‬ ‫‪3400 × 6048‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪3016 × 4528‬‬ ‫‪1968 × 2944‬‬ ‫‪3008 × 3008‬‬ ‫‪2544 × 4528‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪2016 × 3024‬‬ ‫‪1312 × 1968‬‬ ‫‪2000 × 2000‬‬ ‫‪1696 × 3024‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫‪ 104‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ .(352 0‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪b، P، S، A، M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪P، S، A، M‬‬ ‫‪b، P، S، A، M‬‬ ‫‪P، A‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪105 i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b3‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ )ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪.×1‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.5%‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ(‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻨﺎﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 106‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ )ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪.SnapBridge‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪107 i‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓ ﹰﺌﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Q‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻭ‪P‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ‪Q‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‪R‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting D‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(Hi 2–Hi 0.3‬‬ ‫‪ 108‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(" )‪.(81 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪109 i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﹸ‬ ‫‪Sport D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﱠﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﱢﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨ ﱡﺒﺆﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Sport‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ Sport‬ﻭ‪ Normal‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺟﺰ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Normal‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Sport‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 110‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ" )‪.(52 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-S‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ MF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪111 i‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 113.............. Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪118..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 113.............................................‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪118........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 114.........‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪119...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ 11 116............................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪117............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪119...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ 12 118........................................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪119.................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪118.............................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪" A‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ"‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪h‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 112‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(91 0) "Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‬ ‫)‪.(96 ،61 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪113 i‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ("m‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y/y‬‬ ‫‪z/z‬‬ ‫‪1/1‬‬ ‫‪2/2‬‬ ‫‪3/3‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪(4K UHD) 3840×2160‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪(4K UHD) 3840×2160‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪(4K UHD) 3840×2160‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫—‪2‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪120p 3‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪100p 3‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪50p‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 59‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 30p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ‪3‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 25p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ‪3‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 24p ×5‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ‪3‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫—‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛـ ‪ 120p‬ﻭ‪ 60p‬ﻭ‪ 30p‬ﻭ‪ 24p‬ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪ 119.88‬ﻭ‪ 59.94‬ﻭ‪ 29.97‬ﻭ‪ 23.976‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Z 7) DX‬ﺃﻭ ‪(Z 6) FX‬؛ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﹸﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 114‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ" ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 30p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ 120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻌﺎ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪30p ×4‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪25p ×4‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪24p ×5‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ 119.88) 120p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 29.97) 30p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 100) 100p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 25) 25p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 119.88) 120p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 23.976) 24p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪115 i‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bA‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ b1‬ﻭ‪) b20‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،bA‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ FX‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ "FX‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ DX‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ."DX‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FX‬‬ ‫‪DX‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪FX‬‬ ‫‪2160 × 3840‬‬ ‫‪1080 × 1920‬‬ ‫‪2160 × 3840‬‬ ‫‪1080 × 1920‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪DX‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫‪Z6‬‬ ‫‪Z7‬‬ ‫‪ 20.2 × 35.9‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 20.1 × 35.9‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 20.1 × 35.8‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 13.2 × 23.4‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 13.2 × 23.5‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 13.1 × 23.4‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪117 i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ" )‪ ،(106 0‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.(107 0) "Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ" )‪ .(108 0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟـ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪ 120p‬ﺃﻭ ‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪ 100p‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) 1080 × 1920‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ‪51200‬‬ ‫)‪.(Z 6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 118‬ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ"‬ ‫)‪.(110 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.(111 ،54 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪ f‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ" )‪.(52 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-S‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-F‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ MF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪119 i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،i‬ﻭﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫)‪(Q‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫)‪(Q‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫)‪(Q‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.(122 0) DISP‬‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 72‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(11 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟـ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪121‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪1 RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(304 0‬‬ ‫‪ 122‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12 3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪67 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪312.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪132........................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ * ‪54 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪102.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪104............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪163 ،117 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪293 ،38 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪293 ،38 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪66 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪153............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237 ،163 ....................................‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ......................................... * ISO‬‬ ‫* ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪123‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪159..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 124‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪159..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪96 ،61 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪98 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪97 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪99 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪125......................(RGB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ‪125.........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪125........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪125............‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪125‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 1‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪12 13‬‬ ‫‪ 126‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪106........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ......................................... 1 ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ‪256........ 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪52 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪110..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪96 ،61 ...................................... 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪97 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪180...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪163 ،117 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪159..........................‬‬ ‫❚❚‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪4‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪360.......................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪352 ،105 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪184...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪187........................................‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 3‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪175 ،91 ........................... 5 Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 4‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬ ‫‪ 19 19‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪181..........‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪181.....................................................‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting 20 22‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪108.................................‬‬ ‫‪ 21 23‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ‪205........................................... HDR‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪182...................‬‬ ‫‪ 23‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪312.........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪301.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪127‬‬ ‫❚❚‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 5‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( ‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ‪302............................................‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪ 26‬ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪302..............................‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b4‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪.(406 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻓﻪ )‪ .(304 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪17 18 19 20 21‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪26 25‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪1 2 345‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14 13 12 11 10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪132........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪67 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪312.........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪301..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪304................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪125...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪102.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪104............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪163 ،117 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237 ،163 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪293 ،38 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪293 ،38 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪153............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪66 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪106........................................................‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ......................................... 1 ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪108.................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪175 ،91 .............................. Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪180...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪352 ،105 .................................2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪96 ،61 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪98 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪97 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪99 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪187......................................2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ........................‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪.(406 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪129‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :i‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ i‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺺ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ :(WT/‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪.(132 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪ (312 0‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﹸ‬ ‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(67 0‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟـ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 130‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ :(WT/‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪.(132 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )‪.(133 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﹸ‬ ‫• ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(67 0‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟـ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )‪.(133 0‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪.(136 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪131‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ .ftp‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(306 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)‪.(307 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ :(WT‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ftp‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) WT-7‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪ (WT-7‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(307 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪W‬؛‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 132‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ" )‪ ،(49 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪133‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ )ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ ،(x‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 134‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(1‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬؛ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺘﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 7‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .6‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،4‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 7‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪" D‬ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪135‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ" )‪ ،(49 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 136‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×32‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ×24‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ×16‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ )‪ ،Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ×24‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ×18‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ×12‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Z 6‬؛ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .(FX‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Q) W‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪.1:1‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ e‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪137‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﻮ ﱠﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.O‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.K‬‬ ‫‪ 138‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )‪.(140 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫)‪.(153 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) O‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(X‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪139‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ <‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .M‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ 140‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪JPEG/TIFF‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪NCZ_7 :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪NCZ_6 :Z 6‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪DSC‬‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪141‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪c‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 142‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪25600 :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪51200 :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ < ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪G-M: 0 ،A-B: 0‬‬ ‫‪K 5000‬‬ ‫‪d-1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ *‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )‪(NEF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪1×0001‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪143‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪FX‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫* ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫‪ 144‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪DSC‬‬ ‫‪FX‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪25600 :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪51200 :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪G-M: 0 ،A-B: 0‬‬ ‫‪K 5000‬‬ ‫‪d-1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪145‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪a12‬‬ ‫‪a13‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪a9‬‬ ‫‪a10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 146‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 12ø‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫‪d9‬‬ ‫‪d10‬‬ ‫‪d11‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ Z 7) (30×24) 5:4‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪147‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ e3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ e6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫‪ e7‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪f2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫‪f3‬‬ ‫‪f4‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 148‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ < MTR‬ﺗﺤﺖ < ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬؛ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ؛ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ؛ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ؛ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬؛‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ؛ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪(100%) 1 : 1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪f5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪f6‬‬ ‫‪f7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫‪g5‬‬ ‫‪g6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪U :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪U :‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫‪g3‬‬ ‫‪g4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬؛ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ؛ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ؛ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬؛‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ؛ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪248‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪149‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪N-Log‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 150‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪G-M: 0 ،A-B: 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪G-M: 0 ،A-B: 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ‪ V‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪151‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪153‬‬ ‫‪153‬‬ ‫‪153‬‬ ‫‪154‬‬ ‫‪154‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪155‬‬ ‫‪155‬‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫‪157‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" )‪.(141 0‬‬ ‫‪ 152‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ < ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(159 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ .L‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪153‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ( ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺃﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ -‬ﺃﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪ -‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 154‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (154 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ )ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪DSC_0015.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪DSC_0003.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0002.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0001.jpg‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪155‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪.(153 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺻﻨﹼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪157‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ C‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪159‬‬ ‫‪159‬‬ ‫‪163‬‬ ‫‪163‬‬ ‫‪164‬‬ ‫‪164‬‬ ‫‪166‬‬ ‫‪167‬‬ ‫‪168‬‬ ‫‪175‬‬ ‫‪177‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬ ‫‪182‬‬ ‫‪182‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪182‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫‪183‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪183‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪184‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪186‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪187‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪187‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪187‬‬ ‫‪187‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪188‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪198‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪205‬‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫‪210‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪221‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫‪229‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪235‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ"‬ ‫)‪.(141 0‬‬ ‫‪ 158‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪.(141 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻳﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﱢ‬ ‫"‪ (Z 7) "NCZ_7‬ﺃﻭ "‪ .(Z 6) "NCZ_6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪159‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻣﻤﺘﻠ ﹰﺌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .X‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ 160‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :W‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :X‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ‪ :Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ‪ .9999‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍ ﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(G‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﺘﻠ ﹰﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪161‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،999‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠ ﹰﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9999‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5000‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9999‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5000‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 999‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 162‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ "_‪ "DSC‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ،(180 0) Adobe RGB‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ "‪"_DSC‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ "DSC_0001.JPG" ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫"‪ .("_DSC0002.JPG‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ "‪ "DSC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ" )‪.(160 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ".NEF" :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻭ"‪ ".TIF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫)‪ TIFF (RGB‬ﻭ"‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻭ"‪ ".MP4‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،MP4‬ﻭ"‪ ".NDF‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،NEF (RAW)+JPEG‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ NEF‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX c‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ FX‬ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ NIKKOR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .DX‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ‪.1.5‬‬ ‫‪(30×24) 5:4 b‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ Z 7) 4 : 5‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1 m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.1 : 1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9 Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.9 : 16‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪163‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )‪.(102 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ JPEG/TIFF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ TIFF‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪:Z 7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪DX‬‬ ‫‪(30×24) 5:4‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪5504 × 8256‬‬ ‫‪4128 × 6192‬‬ ‫‪2752 × 4128‬‬ ‫‪3600 × 5408‬‬ ‫‪2696 × 4048‬‬ ‫‪1800 × 2704‬‬ ‫‪5504 × 6880‬‬ ‫‪4120 × 5152‬‬ ‫‪2752 × 3440‬‬ ‫‪5504 × 5504‬‬ ‫‪4128 × 4128‬‬ ‫‪2752 × 2752‬‬ ‫‪4640 × 8256‬‬ ‫‪3480 × 6192‬‬ ‫‪2320 × 4128‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ(‪* .‬‬ ‫‪46.6 × 69.9‬‬ ‫‪35.0 × 52.4‬‬ ‫‪23.3 × 35.0‬‬ ‫‪30.5 × 45.8‬‬ ‫‪22.8 × 34.3‬‬ ‫‪15.2 × 22.9‬‬ ‫‪46.6 × 58.3‬‬ ‫‪34.9 × 43.6‬‬ ‫‪23.3 × 29.1‬‬ ‫‪46.6 × 46.6‬‬ ‫‪35.0 × 35.0‬‬ ‫‪23.3 × 23.3‬‬ ‫‪39.3 × 69.9‬‬ ‫‪29.5 × 52.4‬‬ ‫‪19.6 × 35.0‬‬ ‫* ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ؛ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ = ‪ 2.54‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 164‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪DX‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪4024 × 6048‬‬ ‫‪3016 × 4528‬‬ ‫‪2016 × 3024‬‬ ‫‪2624 × 3936‬‬ ‫‪1968 × 2944‬‬ ‫‪1312 × 1968‬‬ ‫‪4016 × 4016‬‬ ‫‪3008 × 3008‬‬ ‫‪2000 × 2000‬‬ ‫‪3400 × 6048‬‬ ‫‪2544 × 4528‬‬ ‫‪1696 × 3024‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ(‪* .‬‬ ‫‪34.1 × 51.2‬‬ ‫‪25.5 × 38.3‬‬ ‫‪17.1 × 25.6‬‬ ‫‪22.2 × 33.3‬‬ ‫‪16.7 × 24.9‬‬ ‫‪11.1 × 16.7‬‬ ‫‪34.0 × 34.0‬‬ ‫‪25.5 × 25.5‬‬ ‫‪16.9 × 16.9‬‬ ‫‪28.8 × 51.2‬‬ ‫‪21.5 × 38.3‬‬ ‫‪14.4 × 25.6‬‬ ‫* ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ؛ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ = ‪ 2.54‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪165‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ NEF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ %40 – 20‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ NEF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ %55 – 35‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.NEF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 12 q‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 14 r‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 166‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ‪ ISO 64‬ﻭ‪) 25600‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،Z 6‬ﺑﲔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭ‪ .(ISO 51200‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪0.3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 2‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ b‬ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ :c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ .A‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(168 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪167‬‬ ‫‪" D‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ" < "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ < ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ :2‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟـﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ" ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ" )‪ (61 0‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(96 0) "i‬‬ ‫‪ 168‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ" )‪ .(97 0‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ" )‪.(174 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪0.5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪.0.25‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ))‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫))‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ (CC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.05‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪169‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("U‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺩﺍﻓﺊ" ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ( ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺃﺑﺮﺩ" ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪" D‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ"‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪ K 1000‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ K 3000‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ K 6000‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،6 10‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺒﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪) K 3000–K 4000‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 83=(K 1000‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫• ‪) K 6000–K 7000‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪ 24=(K 1000‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 170‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–‬ ‫)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("U‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪171‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 172‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ" )‪.(99 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.X‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.X‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪173‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" )‪.(169 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 174‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.(91 0) "Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :Picture Control‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪0.25‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.O‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪.Control‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪175‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪،J‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ 176‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ C-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ C-9‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪ C-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (C-9‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪ 1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (99‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪177‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ C-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (C-9‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 178‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ(‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Picture Control‬؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )‪ .(160 0‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪179‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪sRGB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﹰﺎ ﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB D‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻭ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ" )‪.(108 0‬‬ ‫‪ 180‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ "‪ "Job NR‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻄﺊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪181‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ TIFF‬ﻭ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺿﺒﺎﺏ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 182‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ( ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪" D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 100‬ﻭ‪ 120‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭﹶﻱ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/100‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﻭ‬ ‫‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ" )‪.(106 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪183‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (360 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(347 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪SB-500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-400‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-300‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :TTL‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .i-TTL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 184‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪.(373 0‬‬ ‫‪ AWL Y/Z‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ )‪.(381 0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ AWL Z‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(362 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪185‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(373 ،366 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﹰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ C‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ"‬ ‫)‪.(352 ،105 0‬‬ ‫‪ 186‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪.(354 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ" )‪.(52 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‬ ‫)‪.(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ" )‪.(110 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪187‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪ (ADL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ "ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ WB‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.(ADL‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻨﻮﻉ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 188‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﹸﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪EV 0 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﹸﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪EV −1 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﹸﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪EV +1 :‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻟـ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (qA‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)‪.(406 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،0F‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪189‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ (1/3) 0.3‬ﻭ ‪ (2/3) 0.7‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .EV 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ EV (1/3) 0.3‬ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ )‪(EVs‬‬ ‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪+3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪+0.7/+0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪−3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪-0.3/-0.7/0‬‬ ‫‪+2F‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪+0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪−2F‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪-0.3/0‬‬ ‫"ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ"‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪+0.3/-0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪5F‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪+0.7/+0.3/-0.3/-0.7/0‬‬ ‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪+1.0/+0.7/+0.3/-0.3/-0.7/-1.0/0‬‬ ‫‪9F‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪/-0.3/-0.7/-1.0/-1.3/0‬‬ ‫‪+1.3/+1.0/+0.7/+0.3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،5‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 190‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؛ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪3 :‬؛ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪0.7 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ 0F‬ﻟـ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪191‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ؛ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(P‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(S‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ .(M‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪< ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ((M‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :M‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 192‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.WB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ WB‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،0F‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪193‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 5) 1‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 10) 2‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 15) 3‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ B‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫"ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ"‬ ‫‪0F‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪B3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1B‬‬ ‫‪B2/B1/0‬‬ ‫‪A3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1A‬‬ ‫‪A1/A2/0‬‬ ‫‪B2F‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1B‬‬ ‫‪B1/0‬‬ ‫‪1A‬‬ ‫‪A1/0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪A2F‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪B1/A1/0‬‬ ‫‪5F‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪B2/B1/A1/A2/0‬‬ ‫‪7F‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪9F‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ 194‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1B ،1A‬‬ ‫‪/A1/A2/A3/0‬‬ ‫‪B3/B2/B1‬‬ ‫‪/A1/A2/A3/A4/0‬‬ ‫‪B4/B3/B2/B1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ 0F‬ﻟـ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪195‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ )ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،0F‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 2F‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪OFF L‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪OFF N‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪OFF H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪OFF H‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪OFF AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ 196‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ 0F‬ﻟـ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ؛ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪197‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/2‬ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪1/3 ،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺇﻻ ﺍﻷﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ 198‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ )‪ :(NEF‬ﺍﺧ ﹶﺘﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪199‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 200‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ < )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ )‪ (NEF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(X‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻛﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،7‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ ،2‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪201‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ؛ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.m‬‬ ‫‪ 202‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .i‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪203‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ‪ 90‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 204‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ .(EV 2‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟـ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﻭ‪Time‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﻣﻌﺘﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫)ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻣﺪﻣﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :HDR‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﻤﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪205‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )‪ :(NEF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .HDR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 206‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،HDR‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ HDR‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.HDR‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪207‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﹼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 208‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (NEF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ "‪ "Job‬ﻭ"‪ "HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDR‬؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﻻﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪209‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) M‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﺎﻣ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 210‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ (AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ (AF-S‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪211‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 212‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪213‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .(CL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 214‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪215‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ" ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .Q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 216‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪217‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪ AF-S‬ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﹴ‬ ‫‪ 218‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪) 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ 00:00'0.5‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(( ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻟـ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮﹰﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪219‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻟـ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪Hi 2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ 220‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) M‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﺎﻣ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ FX‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(DX‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪221‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ (AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ (AF-S‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 222‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ )ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(W/Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﹰﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪) 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪223‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 59‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 224‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪225‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ < (258 0 ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (227 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 226‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) J‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟـﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﹴ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪1080 × 1920‬؛ ‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪227‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(( ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟـ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ "‪ 00:00'0.5‬ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻟـ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻟـ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪Hi 2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪ 228‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟـ ‪ AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF-C‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪.(E‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )‪ 300‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪00‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 5.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﺎﻣ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪229‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 230‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪231‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 232‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪.f/11–f/8‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ p‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻟـ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪233‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ((‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻟـ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪Hi 2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪ 234‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪ .(65 0‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪d5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫)ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻭﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )‪.(82 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪235‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪238‬‬ ‫‪238‬‬ ‫‪239‬‬ ‫‪239‬‬ ‫‪239‬‬ ‫‪239‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪241‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪241‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪241‬‬ ‫‪241‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪241‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪242‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪242‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪244‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ"‬ ‫)‪.(144 0‬‬ ‫‪ 236‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪.(144 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ "‪.(163 0) "DSC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ‪ FX‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DX‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )‪.(114 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MOV‬ﺃﻭ ‪.MP4‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪237‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻭ‪.Hi 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (M‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :(M‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(M‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :(M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ (Z 7) ISO 64‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (Z 6) 100‬ﻭ‪ .Hi 2‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟـ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ )‪ .(61 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 238‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪ .(91 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪.(177 0‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)‪.(118 ،108 0‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻞ "ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ" )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(181 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪239‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ .(182 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(182 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(182 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪" D‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﻛﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪ 1/125 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ؛ ﻭ‪ 1/100‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1/50‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/25‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 240‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(106 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(52 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ .(110 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪241‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺻﺎﺧﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 242‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ S‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺨﺐ ﺷﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ T‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪243‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .MOV‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ :(HDMI‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ Atomos SHOGUN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ NINJA‬ﺃﻭ ‪SUMO-series‬‬ ‫‪ Monitor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.00:00:00.00‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﻀﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ‪ 30‬ﻭ‪ 60‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ (HDMI‬ﻟـ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ 244‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪245‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫‪a9‬‬ ‫‪a10‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪a12‬‬ ‫‪a13‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪2AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 246‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪248‬‬ ‫‪249‬‬ ‫‪249‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬ ‫‪251‬‬ ‫‪252‬‬ ‫‪252‬‬ ‫‪253‬‬ ‫‪253‬‬ ‫‪253‬‬ ‫‪254‬‬ ‫‪254‬‬ ‫‪255‬‬ ‫‪255‬‬ ‫‪256‬‬ ‫‪256‬‬ ‫‪257‬‬ ‫‪257‬‬ ‫‪258‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫‪d9‬‬ ‫‪d10‬‬ ‫‪d11‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪e1‬‬ ‫‪e2‬‬ ‫‪e3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪e5‬‬ ‫‪e6‬‬ ‫‪e7‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪e4‬‬ ‫‪f1‬‬ ‫‪f2‬‬ ‫‪f3‬‬ ‫‪f4‬‬ ‫‪f5‬‬ ‫‪f6‬‬ ‫‪f7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪259‬‬ ‫‪259‬‬ ‫‪259‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬ ‫‪261‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪263‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬ ‫‪265‬‬ ‫‪265‬‬ ‫‪266‬‬ ‫‪267‬‬ ‫‪269‬‬ ‫‪277‬‬ ‫‪279‬‬ ‫‪279‬‬ ‫‪281‬‬ ‫‪281‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪247‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪g1‬‬ ‫‪g2‬‬ ‫‪g3‬‬ ‫‪g4‬‬ ‫‪g5‬‬ ‫‪g6‬‬ ‫‪282‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪283‬‬ ‫‪288‬‬ ‫‪288‬‬ ‫‪289‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪.("U‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﹸ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ" )‪.(146 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪.(146 0‬‬ ‫‪ 248‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪.AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪.AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪249‬‬ ‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) 5‬ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ( ﻭ ‪) 1‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬ ‫‪ .AF-C‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪) 1‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ( ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a5‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﻉ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 250‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :a6‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ" )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪251‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ :a7‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 252‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ :a9‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ "ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ "ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ" ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a10‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫‪ :a11‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ b‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ "‪) Low-light‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪253‬‬ ‫‪ :a12‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ AF-S‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓﹶ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3-1‬ﻡ؛ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a13‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 254‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :b2‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(M‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪.(E‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ E‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ "‪ "0‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.±0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪255‬‬ ‫‪ :b3‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :b4‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ +1‬ﺇﻟﻰ –‪ EV 1‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪.EV 1/6‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :c‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪257‬‬ ‫‪ :c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟـ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﹸﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 258‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ :d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ .200‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،d2‬ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ )‪.(r00‬‬ ‫‪ :d3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪259‬‬ ‫‪ :d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪ :d5‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ 1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ (Z 7) ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (Z 6) 51200‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 260‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ :d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،9999‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪.0001‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.0001‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 999‬ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ 5000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،9999‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5000‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ .(9999‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻫﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪261‬‬ ‫‪ :d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻧﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ g‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d10‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭ‪) 2‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭ‪) 1‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ؛ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d11‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 262‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/200‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1/200‬ﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1/200‬ﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺙ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‪.(M‬‬ ‫• ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ((‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)"‪ ("X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ "‪ "FP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪263‬‬ ‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪) A‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :e3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ YE‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 264‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :e6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟـ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪) qA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪265‬‬ ‫‪ :e7‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ < MTR‬ﺗﺤﺖ < ﻓﻮﻕ )‪ ،(H‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ < ‪ < MTR‬ﻓﻮﻕ )‪ ،(I‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.ADL‬‬ ‫‪ 266‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ :f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،J‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪163‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪Control h‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR r‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪،77‬‬ ‫‪167‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫‪،105‬‬ ‫‪352‬‬ ‫‪187‬‬ ‫‪،52‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪111‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪،54‬‬ ‫‪111‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪188‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪198‬‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫‪205‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪ v 96 ،61‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪108‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪269‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪268‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪،293‬‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫‪107‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪267‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﻨ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪ 268‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪l S z 8 7 V y w‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪269‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪l S z 8 7 V y w‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫)‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ I/Y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 270‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪l S z 8 7 V y w‬‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪) HDR 2‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ $‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ X‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ✔‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪271‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﹰ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﹰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ 272‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ( ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪273‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪+ NEF (RAW) 4‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫"‪ "RAW‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺳﺘﺠﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ".‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 274‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I/Y‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ /‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ $‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪275‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪M‬؛ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ $‬ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫‪) X‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 276‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪277‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .(2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ؛ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﹸ‬ ‫‪ 278‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .O‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪ :f5‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﹸ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(A‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻟـ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪279‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .J‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 50‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﹸﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫‪ 280‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f6‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ E‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ (E) c‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ f2‬ﺃﻭ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﻭ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :f7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)‪ ،(W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫)‪ (V‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪281‬‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ :g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،J‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪Control h‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪117‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪238‬‬ ‫‪96 ،61‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪،108‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting y‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪118‬‬ ‫‪،106‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪118‬‬ ‫‪،52‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪119‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪،54‬‬ ‫‪119‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪110‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪118‬‬ ‫‪ 282‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬ ‫‪242‬‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪290‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪،293‬‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪107‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪ :g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ(‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ –‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪l G 8 V y w‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪283‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪l G 8 V y w‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ X‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ✔‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 284‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ ‪< Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ( ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ( ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ ‪ < Fn2‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ – ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ ‪ < Fn1‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ +‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ –‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪285‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Picture Control h‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.9 :16‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ 286‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪) X‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪) M‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪287‬‬ ‫‪ :g3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :g4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ؛ ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ "‪ ،"+5‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 288‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ :g5‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫‪) 7‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻭ‪) 1‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪289‬‬ ‫‪ :g6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،255‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 290‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫‪293‬‬ ‫‪293‬‬ ‫‪294‬‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫‪296‬‬ ‫‪296‬‬ ‫‪297‬‬ ‫‪298‬‬ ‫‪298‬‬ ‫‪299‬‬ ‫‪301‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫)‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪302‬‬ ‫‪303‬‬ ‫‪303‬‬ ‫‪304‬‬ ‫‪304‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫‪307‬‬ ‫‪307‬‬ ‫‪307‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬ ‫‪309‬‬ ‫‪311‬‬ ‫‪311‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" )‪.(150 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪291‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪.(72 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪.(73 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 292‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ" ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻈﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪293‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(X‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ" ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻈﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ؛ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 294‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ؛ ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤ‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )‪ .(294 0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ؛ ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .3‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪295‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪ (w‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ )‪ (x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪ 296‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 30‬ﻧﻮﻋﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪+20‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ .–20‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .O‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪297‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ،CPU‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 298‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪) Capture NX-D‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ FX‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ )ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪299‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﹰﺎ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺎ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺪﻓﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 300‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Capture NX-D‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )‪.(160 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪301‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ .Capture NX-D‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ"‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﹸ‬ ‫)‪ .(160 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )‪ .(160 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 54‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﺍﻉ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 302‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ؛ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬؛ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪303‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.(344 0) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) SnapBridge‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،SnapBridge‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﺘﺼﻼﹰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.GPS‬‬ ‫‪ 304‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،WR-R10‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪.WR-1‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪3.0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻮﻛﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪305‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Fn‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫‪c h‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪+ NEF (RAW) 4‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 306‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ ‪ ftp‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ WT-7‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ WT-7‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪307‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (k) 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (l) 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ؛ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪° 20‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 308‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Picture Control‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Picture Control‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪309‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ(‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ‪d3‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑـ "‪ "NCSET‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 310‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪311‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪318‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪319‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪D-Lighting i‬‬ ‫‪321‬‬ ‫‪ j‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪321‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪322‬‬ ‫‪323‬‬ ‫‪324‬‬ ‫‪327‬‬ ‫‪327‬‬ ‫‪322‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.N‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 312‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪.X‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،NEF + JPEG‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪313‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.p‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ ﹸﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ)‪ TIFF (RGB‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪.m‬‬ ‫‪ 314‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،G‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(4‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪315‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.L‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪ 316‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ −2‬ﻭ‪.EV +2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪102........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪104.......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪96 ،61 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪175 ،91 ...Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR 6‬ﻋﺎﻝ‪181.........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪180.......................................‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪182..............‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting 9‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪108............................‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪182.................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ EXE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪317‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.X‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 318‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﹸ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ N‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪319‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Q) W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(X‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×24) 1:1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ (36×20) 16:9‬ﺃﻭ )‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪ (30×24) 5:4‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟ ﹸﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 320‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺟﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪321‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.25‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 322‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪323‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ NEF/RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ .X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 324‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،J‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 0.1‬ﻭ‪ .2.0‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪1.0‬؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪0.5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(Q) W‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪325‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ m‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭ‪ Picture Control‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 326‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )‪.(133 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ (p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪327‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،K‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 328‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ O‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ‪329‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .V‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4-1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 330‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ‪331‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪3-2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 332‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﹰﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻟـ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ‪333‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﺁﻓﺎﻗﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ ‪ ftp‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ®‪ Apple App Store‬ﻭﻣﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫™‪.Google Play‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.SnapBridge‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،SnapBridge‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﹸ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫‪ 334‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ ،ViewNX-i‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Capture NX-D‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪335‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 336‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ViewNX-i‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ .(Nikon Transfer 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ "ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪Windows 7 D‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) Import pictures and videos‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Change program‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Windows 10 D‬ﻭ‪Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows 10‬ﻭ‪Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫‪macOS/OS X D‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Image Capture‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ macOS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (OS X‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪337‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 338‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪(Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪WT-7‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ ،WT-7‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪ (WT-7‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪.ftp‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WT-7‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Camera Control Pro 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪339‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ )‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ" )‪ (394 0‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 340‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(Q) W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪.(99‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻳﻘﺘﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﺺ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪(Q) W‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪341‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ (X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 256‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ‪ 256‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ "ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ" )‪.(341 0‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ 342‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (411 0) (HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪،HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪343‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 235‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ RGB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .255‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ "ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ" ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 344‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪Atomos Open‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ Protocol‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ )ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ Atomos SHOGUN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ NINJA‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(SUMO-series‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫)ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ‪HDMI‬؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ﻭ‪ 10‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪345‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ :N-Log‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺖ ﻟـﻋﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (M‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 25600‬ﻭ‪ ISO 800‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Z 7) 25600‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Z 6) 51200‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟـ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .N-Log‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ 120p 1080 × 1920‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 100p 1080 × 1920‬ﺃﻭ ‪1920‬‬ ‫× ‪ 1080‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ SnapBridge‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.Camera Control Pro 2‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺖ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪:2160 × 3840‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ DX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Z 7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ .90%‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪.90%‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Z 6‬ﹰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ 2160 × 3840‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪1080 × 1920‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 346‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ "ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ"‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﹸﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )‪.(348 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (AWL‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ" )‪.(360 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪347‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪250‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (c‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (350 0‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪.(352 0‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 348‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪A ،P ،b‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ 1/200‬ﺙ–‪/60‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺙ( *‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ 1/200‬ﺙ–‪ 30‬ﺙ(‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ 1/200‬ﺙ–‪ 30‬ﺙ‪) Bulb ،‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪Time ،‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ((‬ ‫* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪349‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺣ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-400‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ (SB-300‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ ،SB-5000‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :TTL‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .i-TTL‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ SB-500‬ﻭ‪ SB-400‬ﻭ‪ ،SB-300‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ؛ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )‪ (qA‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ .(A) "TTL‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 350‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟـ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CLS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،TTL‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ :i-TTL‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻜﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ )ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺒﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪351‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﲔ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ‪ 1/200‬ﺙ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 1/8000‬ﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﻭ‪ 1/60‬ﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪،S ،P ،b‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬ ‫‪M ،A‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ" )ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﲟﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ(‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫‪ + K‬ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A ،P‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 352‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫‪،S ،P ،b‬‬ ‫‪M ،A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪353‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ EV–3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV+1‬ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،EV 1/3‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰ ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،±0.0‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .±0.0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 354‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪:FV‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻷﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CLS‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CLS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟـ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-400‬ﺃﻭ ‪(SB-300‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ qA‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) A‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪355‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ (c‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﹸﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪(r) FV‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .FV‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ (r) FV‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 356‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ )‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-400‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ (SB-300‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ .(15 0‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪348 ..........................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺪﺓ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 ،184.....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263 ...................................................FP‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪350 .............................(TTL‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪352 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪355 .................FV‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪354 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 ،184.....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263 ...................................................FP‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪350 ............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪357‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 ،184.....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263 ...................................................FP‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ‪350 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪350 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 ،184.....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263 ...................................................FP‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 358‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪350 ،184.....................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ‪350 .........................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ )ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ(‪350 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪350 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪359‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ .(AWL‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )‪.(347 0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ ،C‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .f‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،f‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪) WR-R10‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫)‪(362 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫)‪(373 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(372 0‬‬ ‫‪ 360‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫• ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(381 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪361‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .SB-5000‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪.WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.WR-R10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ <‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 362‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪< (WR‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻭﺟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺰﺍﻭﺟﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺟﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪363‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:4‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .WR-R10‬ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ LINK‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ؛ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LINK‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .4‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ LINK‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ <‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ"( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 364‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪.5-3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LINK‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪365‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :TTL‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫• ‪ :qA‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ(‬ ‫• ‪ :M‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫• – – )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 366‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﻣﻦ "‪ "A‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ ("F‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪367‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪ "B‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪ "C‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪."B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪."B‬‬ ‫‪ 368‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪:"C‬‬ ‫• ‪ :M‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• – –‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪ "C‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )"‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "B‬ﺃﻭ "‪ .("C‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪369‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ <‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ– –‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ )ﻣﻦ "‪ "A‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ ("F‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 370‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪371‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :SB-5000‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ d‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ »‪ «M‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :SB-600 ،SB-700 ،SB-800 ،SB-900 ،SB-910‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺬﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :SB-300 ،SB-400 ،SB-500‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 372‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪AWL‬‬ ‫ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ"‪ .(406 0 ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SB-500‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(؛ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪SB-500‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ <‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-5000‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪373‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :TTL‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫• ‪ :qA‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ(‬ ‫• ‪ :M‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫• – – )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 374‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ ،SB-500‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ .3‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )"‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "B‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "C‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ SB-500‬ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫"‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪ ("B‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪375‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ SB-5000‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪ "B‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪ "C‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪."B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ "‪ "A‬ﻭ"‪."B‬‬ ‫‪ 376‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪:"C‬‬ ‫• ‪ :M‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫• – –‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪ "C‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ ،SB-500‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ .3‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )"‪ "A‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "B‬ﺃﻭ "‪ .("C‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪377‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ SB-5000‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ <‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 378‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ– –‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ ،SB-500‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ .3‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪379‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (C‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺘﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ (384 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ c‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ :C/f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AWL D‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﹸﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ(‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(qA‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 380‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ Speedlight‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SU-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-910‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-700‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .WR-R10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-500‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،SU-800‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟـ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ )ﻣﻦ "‪"A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ ("F‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ "‪ "A‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ "‪ "D‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪) "F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ "‪ "D‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ ،"F‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪381‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-5000‬ﻭ‪SB-500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .WR-R10‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ .(15 0‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 382‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪362........................ 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263...................................................FP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186 ،185.....2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪374 ،366..........................................3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪374 ،366..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ(‪/‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪374 ،366............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪362 ،185.................................................2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪362............................................. 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪4 5‬‬ ‫‪5 6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪362........................ 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪263...................................................FP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186 ،185.....2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪376 ،368......................................B : A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪376 ،368...............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪376 ،368.............."C‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪362 ،185.................................................2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪362............................................. 4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪4 5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪362........................ 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ‪378 ،370................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪186 ،185.....2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ( ‪378 ،370..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪378 ،370............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪378 ،370............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪362 ،185.................................................2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪362............................................. 4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،Y‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،Z‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ .Z‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SB-500‬ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪383‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 384‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ" )‪(386 0‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ" )‪(392 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ )‪ .(xxii 0‬ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﱢﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(311 0‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪385‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،AF-S‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻓﹰﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 386‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF-F‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(53 0‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(؛ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ"؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪387‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ" )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 388‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG+NEF‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Picture Control‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﹰﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a12‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MF‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟـ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ :NEF (RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.JPEG + NEF‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﻋﺮﻳﺾ" )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪389‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻃﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Capture NX-D‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ :HDMI‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ < HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 390‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪391‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪FH‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫––‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬ ‫‪Busy‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫‪Bulb‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 392‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪Full‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪Err‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f-‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ • ﻗﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪393‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ [–E–] .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Card, Err‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ For‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 394‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ،DCF‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻻ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫* ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪395‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ( ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2 4 6 8 10‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1 3 5 7 9 11 12 13 14 16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪38 37 35 33 31 29 27 26 25 24‬‬ ‫‪36 34 32 30 28‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪69 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪72 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪54 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪210.................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"‪40 ..............‬‬ ‫‪ 396‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪352 ،105 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪59 .................................‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪109 ،81 ......................................‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪54 ،42 ..........................‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪241 ،187 ،52.................‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪241 ،187 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪239 ،180 ،108 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪239 ،175 ،91..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪238 ،168 ،96 ،61 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،102 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪237 ،163 ،117 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،104 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪107.................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪21 ،13 ..................................................i‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪189...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193.................................WB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196............................... ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪198..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪188................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪188................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪198.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪71 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪189.....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193............................................ WB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196........................................... ADL‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪306............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪306............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪410..........................‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪78 ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ............‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪354............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪56 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪279......................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪263.............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪279............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪409 ،355 .......FV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪241 ،183 ،106 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪87 ،86 ..................................................... (AE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻒ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ‪183....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ‪235 ،65 ................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪260.........‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪260................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪187 ،110 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪57 ،10 .................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪262.............‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪398.................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪397‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 398‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪7 8‬‬ ‫‪12 3 4 5 6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪12 68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪69 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪72 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪279............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪263.............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪13 279......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪14 70 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪189...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪16 193.................................WB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪17 196............................... ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪198..................‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪71 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪189.....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193............................................ WB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196........................................... ADL‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪21 ،13 ..................................................i‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪78 ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪409 ،355 .......FV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪87 ،86 ..................................................... (AE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪354............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪79 ............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪79 .............‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪399‬‬ ‫‪27 28‬‬ ‫‪20 21 22 23 24 25 26‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪30 306............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪31 306............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪107.................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪33 181......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ‪34 235 ،65 ................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪35 260.........‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪36 260................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪37 210.................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"‪38 40 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪184...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ"‪39 303......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪40 34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪41 339 ،107 ...............‬‬ ‫‪ 400‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪109 ،81 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪241 ،187 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪241 ،187 ،52.................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪187 ،110 .................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪239 ،180 ،108 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪241 ،183 ،106 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،104 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪238 ،168 ،96 ،61 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪239 ،175 ،91..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،102 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪352 ،105 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪398.................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪8 45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪9 46 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪344...........‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪11 237 ،114 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪12 45 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪13 244........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪243...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪243.................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪81 ................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪116........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪242 ،116 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪243.................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪241 ،118 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪401‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11 12 13‬‬ ‫‪4 5 6 7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36 35 33 31 29 28 27 26 24 23‬‬ ‫‪34 32 30‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪12 34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪13 262.............‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪14 187 ،110 .....................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪352 ،105 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪109 ،81 ......................................‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪241 ،187 ،52.................‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪241 ،187 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪239 ،180 ،108 ...‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪239 ،175 ،91..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪238 ،168 ،96 ،61 ......................‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،102 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 402‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،104 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪237 ،163 ،117 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪306............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪306............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪107.................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪54 ،42 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪189...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193.................................WB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196............................... ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪198..................‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪29 188................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪30 188................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪205.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪198.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪56 ............................................‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪354..............................‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪410..........................‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪41 78 ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪42 79 ............‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪43 71 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪79 .............‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪45 189............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193.....................................WB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196....................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪279......................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪263.............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪409 ،355 .......FV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪87 ،86 ..................................................... (AE‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪72 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪241 ،183 ،106 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪59 .................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪260................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ‪235 ،65 ................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪260.........‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪68 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪69 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻒ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ‪183....................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪279............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪210.................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"‪40 ..............‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪54 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪398.................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪403‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪237 ،114 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪163..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪344...........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪46 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪244........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪45 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪81 ................‬‬ ‫‪ 404‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪116........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪242 ،116 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪243.................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪243...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪243.................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪241 ،118 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ 8 279............................‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪461 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ 9 79 ............‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪81 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ 10 79 .............‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ........................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ 11 279......................................‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪354............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ "ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ" ‪105...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪70 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ 12 34 ..........................................‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪263.............................‬‬ ‫"‪) "k‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ(‪34 .........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪405‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪CLS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫‪SB-910‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-800‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪GN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ qA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪✔3‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫‪✔2‬‬ ‫‪✔2‬‬ ‫✔ ‪✔ ✔2‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪ RPT‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫— —‬ ‫‪ 406‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪i-TTL 1‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫‪SB-R200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪:CLS‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫— —‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ qA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫‪SB-910‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-800‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪ [A:B‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪SB-R200‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL i-TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫— ‪✔ ✔4‬‬ ‫— ‪— ✔4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ‪— ✔5‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪ RPT‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫‪i-TTL i-TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ‪— ✔4‬‬ ‫— — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪✔6‬‬ ‫‪✔6‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪ [A:B‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪ A/A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪✔7‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﻓﻼﺵ(‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪(LED‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ RPT‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪8‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪9 FV‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫— — ✔‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪✔ 10‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔ ✔ ✔ ✔‬ ‫— — ✔ —‬ ‫✔ ✔ — —‬ ‫— — ✔ ✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪407‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ qA/A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ qA‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭ‪ qA‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ GN‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ qA‬ﺃﻭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟـ ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ‪ SB-900‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlight‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪SU-800‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،CLS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SU-800‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-910‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-700‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-600‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-R200‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SU-800‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪CLS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ،(qA‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 408‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،SB-80DX‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪SB-50DX، SB-23،‬‬ ‫‪SB-28DX، SB-28،‬‬ ‫‪SB-29، SB-21B،‬‬ ‫‪،SB-26، SB-25‬‬ ‫‪SB-29S‬‬ ‫‪SB-24‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪SB-30، SB-27 1،‬‬ ‫‪SB-22S، SB-22،‬‬ ‫‪SB-20، SB-16B،‬‬ ‫‪SB-15‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ REAR‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) A‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪.(TTL‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﻭ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ qA‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ qA‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .A‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ‪ 6‬ﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪qA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪qA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪409‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ‪ SB-80DX‬ﻭ‪ SB-28DX‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.SB-50DX‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 64‬ﻭ‪ (Z 7) 12800‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻭ‪ .(Z 6) 12800‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،12800‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(c‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ CLS‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ SC 17‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 28‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 29‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،i-TTL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺎﺑﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﺡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (f‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3200‬‬ ‫‪1600‬‬ ‫‪800‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫‪6400‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12800‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SB-5000‬ﻭ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ‪ SB-900‬ﻭ‪ SB-800‬ﻭ‪ SB-700‬ﻭ‪SB-600‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ SB-500‬ﻭ‪ SB-400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪ SD-9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SD-8A‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 410‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :EN-EL15b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪.(463 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :MH-25a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ MH-25a‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .EN-EL15b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.MH-25‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ :EH-7P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ EH-7P‬ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،EP-5B‬ﻭﻭﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ EH-5c‬ﻭ ‪ :EH-5b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪EH-5b/EH-5c‬؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ"‬ ‫)‪ (416 0‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪ (NC‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻘﻒ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ Y44) ×1‬ﻭ ‪ Y48‬ﻭ ‪ Y52‬ﻭ ‪ O56‬ﻭ ‪ R60‬ﻭ ‪ X0‬ﻭ ‪X1‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ C-PL‬ﻭ ‪ ND2S‬ﻭ ‪ ND4‬ﻭ ‪ ND4S‬ﻭ ‪ ND8‬ﻭ ‪ ND8S‬ﻭ ‪ ND400‬ﻭ ‪ A2‬ﻭ ‪ A12‬ﻭ ‪ B2‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ B8‬ﻭ ‪ .(B12‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(I‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪(453 0) FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪411‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫‪ MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :GP-1A/GP-1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ GP-1A/GP-1‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ )‪ (UTC‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.GP-1A/GP-1‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :UC-E24‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :UC-E25‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪.C‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :HC-E1‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :BS-1‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ :BF-N1‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :WT-7‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ WT-7‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Camera Control Pro 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 412‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪/WR-R10‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ ،WR-R10‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ WR-R10‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻭﺟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :WR-1‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪WR-1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WR-T10‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ WR-1‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ WR-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻛﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-1‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ (WR-1‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-T10‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-1‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭ‪WR-1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ )ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 1.0.1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .(WR-1‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻮﻛﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :DK-29‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ‪ DK-29‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪413‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ME-1‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-W1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Camera Control Pro 2‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ (PC‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Nikon Message Center 2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻟﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ BS-1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 414‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB/HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﱢ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻮﺍﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪415‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(q‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 416‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EH-5b/EH-5c‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ (e‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ .(r‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪417‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪،60%‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 50‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° -10‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺤﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺷﻤﻮﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 418‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﹸﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ"‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ؛ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪419‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 420‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ" )‪ .(419 0‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪421‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ؛ ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺑﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺑﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 422‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺯﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )‪ .(419 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ )‪ (422 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻭ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺼﺢ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺃﻋﻮﺍﻡ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪423‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 424‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )‪.(419 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻔﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻔﻔﺔ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﺷﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪425‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،99.99%‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.01%‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﻮﺍﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻮﻋﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻫﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻔﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻮﻋﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥﹶ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 426‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺮﻏﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 15‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪° 25‬ﻡ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪° 35‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 40‬ﻡ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪° 15‬ﻡ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪° 45‬ﻡ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪° 60‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 60‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺷﺤﻦ( )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪427‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﺤﻨﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪.EN-EL15b‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ MH-25a‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ )ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺰﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 428‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z 6/Z 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ F‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ؛ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ‪ 45.7 :Z 7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ‪ 24.5 :Z 6‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ 23.9 × 35.9 CMOS‬ﻣﻢ )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪(Nikon FX‬‬ ‫• ‪ 46.89 :Z 7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ‪ 25.28 :Z 6‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(Capture NX-D‬؛ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ‪Z7‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×24) FX‬‬‫‪) 5504 × 8256‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 45.4 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 4128 × 6192‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 25.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2752 × 4128‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 11.4 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×16) DX‬‬‫‪) 3600 × 5408‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 19.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2696 × 4048‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 10.9 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 1800 × 2704‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 4.9 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(30×24) 5:4‬‬‫‪) 5504 × 6880‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 37.9 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 4120 × 5152‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 21.2 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2752 × 3440‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 9.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪429‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 430‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬‫‪) 5504 × 5504‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 30.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 4128 × 4128‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 17.0 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2752 × 2752‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 7.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬‫‪) 4640 × 8256‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 38.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 3480 × 6192‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 21.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2320 × 4128‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 9.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪× 3840‬‬‫‪2160 × 3840 :2160‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪1080 × 1920 :‬‬ ‫• ‪Z6‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×24) FX‬‬‫‪) 4024 × 6048‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 24.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 3016 × 4528‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 13.7 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2016 × 3024‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 6.1 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×16) DX‬‬‫‪) 2624 × 3936‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 10.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 1968 × 2944‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 5.8 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 1312 × 1968‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 2.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬‫‪) 4016 × 4016‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 16.1 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 3008 × 3008‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 9.0 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2000 × 2000‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 4.0 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬‫‪) 3400 × 6048‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 20.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2544 × 4528‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 11.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 1696 × 3024‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 5.1 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪× 3840‬‬‫‪2160 × 3840 :2160‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪1080 × 1920 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫• )‪ 12 :NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ؛ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﻐﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ؛ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• )‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫• ‪ :JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG-Baseline‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(4 : 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(8 : 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪(16 : 1‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ؛ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ :JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Creative Picture Control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﻓﺎﺗﻦ ﻭﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺪ ﻭﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻭﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺌﻴﺐ ﻭﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺑﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﺤﻤﻲ ﻭﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ ﻭﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ(؛‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ؛ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪XQD‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﻭ ‪ Exif 2.31‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ OLED‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪1.27-‬ﺳﻢ‪ 0.5-/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪-3690k‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )‪ (Quad VGA‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 11‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ‪ 100%‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ‪ 100%‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ ×0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻻﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ‪ −1.0‬ﻡ ‪(−1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪431‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﻣﻢ )‪ −1.0‬ﻡ ‪−1‬؛ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫‪ +2 – −4‬ﻡ ‪−1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ؛‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ؛ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 30 – 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،EV 1/2‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪X200 ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/200 = X‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ؛‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫• ‪Z7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 5-1 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ 5.5 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ 14 NEF/RAW‬ﺑﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‪ 9 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪NEF/RAW‬‬‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‪ 8 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ‪Z6‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 5-1 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ 5.5 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‪ 12 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪NEF/RAW‬‬‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‪ 9 :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ 20 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ‪ 9–1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 432‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ ،ISO 100‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪° 20 ،f/2.0‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75%‬ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.5%‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ‪EV +17 – −3 :Z 7‬‬ ‫• ‪EV +17 – −4 :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(b‬؛ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )‪(P‬؛‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(S‬؛ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(A‬؛ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(M‬؛‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪U1‬؛ ‪U2‬؛ ‪(U3‬‬ ‫‪ EV +5 – −5‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 1/2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ(‬ ‫‪ (ISO 32‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 64‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪EV 2‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (ISO 102400‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ISO 25600‬؛ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫• ‪ 51200 – ISO 100 :Z 6‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1/2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫‪ (ISO 50‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪EV 2‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (ISO 204800‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ISO 51200‬؛ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ 25600 – ISO 64 :Z 7‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1/2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪433‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻫﺠﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ )ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ • ‪EV +19 – −1 :Z 7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪EV +19 – −2 :Z 6 • ،AF-S/‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ • ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪EV +19 – −4 :‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 20 ،f/2.0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ :(AF‬ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪(AF-S‬؛ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF-C‬؛ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ )‪AF-F‬؛ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(؛ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ :(M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ • ‪493 :Z 7‬‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪273 :Z 6 • ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪(FX‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(؛ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(؛ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(؛ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ )ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪(VR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 434‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪-5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫‪ :TTL‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪i-TTL‬؛ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ i-TTL‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ EV +1 – −3‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 1/2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ISO 518‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ i-TTL‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،FV‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪FP‬‬ ‫)‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ )‪ 7‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ ،(K 10000–K 2500‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻗﻴﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ‪(4K UHD) 2160 × 3840‬؛ ‪) 30p‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻲ(‪24p ،25p ،‬‬ ‫• ‪1080 × 1920‬؛ ‪24p ،25p ،30p ،50p ،60p ،100p ،120p‬‬ ‫• ‪) 1080×1920‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(; ‪5× 24p ،4× 25p ،4× 30p‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 120p‬ﻭ‪ 100p‬ﻭ‪ 60p‬ﻭ‪50p‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 30p‬ﻭ‪ 25p‬ﻭ‪ 24p‬ﻫﻲ ‪ 119.88‬ﻭ‪ 100‬ﻭ‪ 59.94‬ﻭ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪ 29.97‬ﻭ‪25‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 23.976‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ‪ 2160 × 3840‬ﻭ‪100p/120p 1080 × 1920‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪m‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪435‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪MP4 ،MOV‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4/H.264‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‪AAC ،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻫﻦ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ‪:Z 7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ‪ :b -‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪(25600‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ(‬ ‫ ‪ :A ،S ،P‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ISO 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(Hi 2‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ‪ :M‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ISO 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(Hi 2‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ ISO 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 25600‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (EV 1/2‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫‪ (ISO 102400‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ISO 25600‬‬ ‫• ‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫ ‪ :b‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫‪(51200‬‬ ‫ ‪ :A ،S ،P‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫‪ (Hi 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ‪ :M‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(Hi 2‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 51200‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (EV 1/2‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ‬ ‫‪ (ISO 204800‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ISO 51200‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪(N-Log‬‬ ‫‪ 436‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪-8‬ﺳﻢ‪-3.2/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻣﺎﻟﺔ ‪TFT‬‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 2100‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ‪ ،° 170‬ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،100%‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 11‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻊ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺺ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(SuperSpeed USB) C‬؛ ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ؛ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n :‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 2462–2412 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(11‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪:(EIRP‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 7‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 7.0 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ ‪ :Z 6‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 7.4 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫• ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪WPA2-PSK ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪437‬‬ ‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ(‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪:(EIRP‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 7‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.5 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 6‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.9 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0.4 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪(463 0‬؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪) EH-7P‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EH-5b/EH-5c‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،EP-5B‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1/4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪(ISO 1222‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 67.5 × 100.5 × 134‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 675‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ؛ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 585‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪ 438‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (CIPA‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MH-25a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.12–0.23 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 8.4‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 1.2/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 71 × 33.5 × 95‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 115‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ q ،DC p ،AC m‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) II‬ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪439‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪) EH-7P‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 5.0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 3.0/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 58.5 × 26.5 × 65.5‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫‪ 125‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ‪ EH-7P‬ﹸﻣﺮﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ q ،DC p ،AC m‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) II‬ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ‪(.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ 7.0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 1900 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 20.5 × 56 × 40‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫‪ 80‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 440‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ IOS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Cisco Systems، Inc‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ Mac .‬ﻭ ‪ macOS‬ﻭ ‪ OS X‬ﻭ ‪ ®Apple‬ﻭ ‪ ®App Store‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Apple‬ﻭ ‪ ®iPhone‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ®iPad‬ﻭ ‪ ®iPod touch‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Android‬ﻭ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ .LLC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ .3.0‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ XQD .‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Sony. HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪.Licensing LLC‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ )‪ (®Bluetooth‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been‬‬ ‫‪designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in‬‬ ‫‪the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple‬‬ ‫‪performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation‬‬ ‫‪of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.‬‬ ‫‪Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may‬‬ ‫‪affect wireless performance.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪441‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪(FreeType2) FreeType‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ FreeType‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2012‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freetype.org‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪) MIT‬ﺣﺮﻑﺑﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ HarfBuzz‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2018‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪AVC Patent Portfolio License‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (i‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪") AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ("AVC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (ii‬ﻓﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻳﻤﺎﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ﹼﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .L.L.C ،MPEG LA‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://www.mpegla.com‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﻴﺊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﻸﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 442‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DCF‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.0‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪ (DCF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Exif‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.31‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) Exif‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،2.31‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Exif‬‬ ‫• ‪ :PictBridge‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪443‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﱠﺮ ﺃﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪10 11‬‬ ‫‪7 8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ 444‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻫﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧ ﹶﺘﺮ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪445 NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 446‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻭ‪ 70‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪447 NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(I‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(K‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﱠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﱠﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺭﻛ ﱠﺰﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﱠﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 448‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﱢﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺿﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻹﺑﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻓﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪449 NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﱠﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﱠﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﱠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﱠﻠﺔ ﺑﺨﻔﱠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﻄﱠ ﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﱠﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﱠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﱠﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﱠﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﹼﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻔﱠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﱠﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﱠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻟﻄﺨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪) (NC‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 450‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-72B‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪LF-N1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪HB-85‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪CL-C1‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﱠﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻟﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﹼﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﱠﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﱠﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﱡ ﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻴﺴﺘﺮ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﱢ‬ ‫ﺤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪451 NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ 70 – 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪f/4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ 11‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ED‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ ED‬ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ(‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´20 ° 34 – ° 84 :FX‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´50 ° 22 – ° 61 :DX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ )‪(70 ،50 ،35 ،28 ،24‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ 0.3‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪) 7‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻏﺸﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪22 – f/4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 0.75 = P‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 77.5‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ‪ 88.5‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 500‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 452‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) F‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) 1‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .1 NIKKOR‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﱠﺮ ﺃﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ ،Z‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ ،F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/491/FTZ.html‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪453 FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) F‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 454‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ،(q‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪455 FTZ‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ )‪ ،(e‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ )‪.(r‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (e‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(r‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 456‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ )ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﱟ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/2.8‬ﻣﻢ‪) PC 35‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪–851001‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪AI‬‬ ‫‪(906200‬‬ ‫• ‪IX-NIKKOR‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪) PC 35‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪TC-16A AF‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/6.3‬ﻣﻢ‪) Reflex 1000‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/3.5‬ﺳﻢ‪NIKKOR-H Auto 2.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ f/5.6،‬ﻣﻢ‪ f/4.5، 600‬ﻣﻢ‪AU-1 (400‬‬ ‫)‪ f/3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ (28‬ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ f/11‬ﻣﻢ‪ f/8، 1200‬ﻣﻢ‪(800‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )‪ f/5.6،‬ﻣﻢ‪ f/5.6، 7.5‬ﻣﻢ‪6‬‬ ‫‪362000‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/2.8‬ﺳﻢ‪NIKKOR-S Auto 3.5‬‬ ‫‪ f/5.6‬ﻣﻢ‪ f/8، OP 10‬ﻣﻢ‪(8‬‬ ‫)‪ f/2.8‬ﻣﻢ‪ (35‬ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ‪ f/4‬ﺳﻢ‪2.1‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪K2‬‬ ‫‪928000‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/8 ED‬ﻣﻢ‪) 600–180‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/2‬ﺳﻢ‪NIKKOR-S Auto 5‬‬ ‫‪(174180–174041‬‬ ‫)‪ f/2‬ﻣﻢ‪(50‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/11 ED‬ﻣﻢ‪) 1200–360‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/3.5‬ﺳﻢ‪NIKKOR-Q Auto 13.5‬‬ ‫‪(174127–174031‬‬ ‫)‪ f/3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ (135‬ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ‪ f/9.5‬ﻣﻢ‪) 600–200‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪–280001‬‬ ‫‪753000‬‬ ‫‪(300490‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/3.5‬ﺳﻢ‪Micro-NIKKOR 5.5‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪Medical-NIKKOR Auto‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/2.8، AF) F3AF‬ﻣﻢ‪AF 80‬‬ ‫‪ f/5.6‬ﻣﻢ‪200‬‬ ‫‪ f/3.5 ED،‬ﻣﻢ‪ 200‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪ • (TC-16 AF‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/4‬ﻣﻢ‪) PC 28‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪ 180900‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ f4–4.5‬ﻣﻢ‪250–85‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom‬‬ ‫‪ f9.5–10.5‬ﻣﻢ‪600–200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪457 FTZ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .NIKKOR F‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 1300‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ )ﺗﻴﻠﻴﻔﻮﺗﻮ( ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺄ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 458‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﺃ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ‪BF-1B‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪LF-N1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 70‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ( × ‪ 80‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 135‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪459 FTZ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .XQD‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ 45‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (×300‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 460‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ Sony G-series QD-G64E XQD‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 64‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ (36×24) FX‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ ‪.(2018‬‬ ‫‪:Z 7‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫‪JPEG 3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻞ ﻑ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 44.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 31.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 24.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 55.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 40.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 49.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 74.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 85.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 134.6‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 76.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 34.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 17.2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 11.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 11.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 7.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1.6‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪748‬‬ ‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪1400‬‬ ‫‪654‬‬ ‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪845‬‬ ‫‪748‬‬ ‫‪654‬‬ ‫‪412‬‬ ‫‪723‬‬ ‫‪1500‬‬ ‫‪1900‬‬ ‫‪3200‬‬ ‫‪6500‬‬ ‫‪3700‬‬ ‫‪6400‬‬ ‫‪12700‬‬ ‫‪7500‬‬ ‫‪12300‬‬ ‫‪24100‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪461‬‬ ‫‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫‪JPEG 3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 22.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 28.2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 20.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 24.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 38.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 44.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 69.3‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 39.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 18.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 4.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3.9‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪1300‬‬ ‫‪1900‬‬ ‫‪2500‬‬ ‫‪1100‬‬ ‫‪1800‬‬ ‫‪1500‬‬ ‫‪1300‬‬ ‫‪1100‬‬ ‫‪759‬‬ ‫‪1300‬‬ ‫‪2800‬‬ ‫‪3400‬‬ ‫‪5600‬‬ ‫‪10400‬‬ ‫‪6700‬‬ ‫‪10900‬‬ ‫‪19900‬‬ ‫‪13000‬‬ ‫‪20800‬‬ ‫‪35200‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ .100‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("m‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ JPEG‬ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﹼﺩ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪"m‬؛‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬؛ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 462‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 1 EN-EL15b‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 330 :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ 310 ،(Z 7‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(Z 6‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 400 :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ 380 ،(Z 7‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ‪ ،3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 85 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 85 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪:EN-EL15b‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(CIPA‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪° 23‬ﻡ )‪° ±2‬ﻡ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪ NIKKOR Z 70–24‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪° 23‬ﻡ )‪° ±2‬ﻡ( ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪ NIKKOR Z 70–24‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪CIPA‬‬ ‫)‪ ،Camera and Imaging Products Association‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ ‪ 59‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪463‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪68 ،45 ،41 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ( ‪69 ،68..............................‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟـﻮﻳــﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪69 ،68........................‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪70 ،68............................‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪70 ،68..........................................................‬‬ ‫‪72 ،68......................................................... U3/U2/U1‬‬ ‫‪) U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ‪109 ،84 ،81......................................‬‬ ‫‪) V‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪109 ،81 .........................‬‬ ‫‪) W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪109 ،81 ...............................‬‬ ‫‪) X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ((‪109 ،82 ...............‬‬ ‫‪) E‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪109 ،84 ،82 ...................................‬‬ ‫‪) 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪111 ،54 ............‬‬ ‫‪) d‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪119 ،111 ،54 .....‬‬ ‫‪) e‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ( ‪111 ،54 ...‬‬ ‫‪) f‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪((S‬‬ ‫‪119 ،111 ،55‬‬ ‫‪) g‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪((L‬‬ ‫‪119 ،111 ،55‬‬ ‫‪) h‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪،111 ،55 ......‬‬ ‫‪119‬‬ ‫‪) L‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ(‪106 ...................................................‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪106 ......................................‬‬ ‫‪) N‬ﺑﻘﻌﺔ(‪106 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫‪) t‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪106 .......................................‬‬ ‫‪) J‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ(‪352 ،105 ................‬‬ ‫‪) L‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪352 ،105 ...........................‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ‪353 ،105..............‬‬ ‫‪) E‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪79.......................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪120 ،49 .............................................................K‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪51 .........................................................................O‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪18...................................................................G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪81...............................................................(E) c‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‪78 ،77............................................................ S‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪121 ،120 ،20 ........................................... (Q) W‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪137 ،120 .............................................................X‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪203 ،130 ،89 ،21 ............................................... i‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪18........................................................................J‬‬ ‫‪) I‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪59 ......................‬‬ ‫‪) c‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪410............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪40 ....................................................................t‬‬ ‫‪104 ....................................................(24 × 24) 1 : 1‬‬ ‫‪104 ..................................................(20 × 36) 9 : 16‬‬ ‫‪104 ....................................................(24 × 30) 4 : 5‬‬ ‫‪ 464‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪119 ،111 ،53 ....................................................... AF-C‬‬ ‫‪119 ،53................................................................ AF-F‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪380 ،373..............................................‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪381 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪362 ............................................................‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪335 ،66 ........................................... Capture NX-D‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪321 .........................................................D-Lighting‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪239 ،180 ،118 ،108...............‬‬ ‫‪104 ........................................................................DX‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪443 ...................................................................... Exif‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪117 ،104 ............................................................... FX‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪443 ،343 ،304 ................................................ HDMI‬‬ ‫‪77 ............................................................................Hi‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‪239 ،181 ..............................................‬‬ ‫‪406 ،357 ،351 ،350 ........................................i-TTL‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪102 ................................................................... JPEG‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪) L‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ‪104 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫‪77 ........................................................................... Lo‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪104 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪119 ،111 ،53 ..........................................................MF‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫)‪166 ،102 ............................................... NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪443 ،340................................................PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪180 ،163 ،124 ،102 .........................................RGB‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪104 .............................................................‬‬ ‫‪334 ،40 ............................................... SnapBridge‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫)‪102 ........................................................ TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪340 ،335............................................................ USB‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪335 ،66 .................................................... ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪96 ،61.......................................‬‬ ‫‪339 ،107 .......................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪132‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪132 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪140 ،139 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪249 .......................................... AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪249 ...........................................AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪،96 ،63‬‬ ‫‪171 ،98‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪237 ،163 ،117 ،104 ........‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪133 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪8 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪239 ،177 ................ Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪160 ،13 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪457 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪37................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪299 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪348 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪385 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪311.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪43 ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪44 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪109 ،84 ،81...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪311 ،248 ،237 ،159 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪292 ،73 ...........‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪248 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪311...........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪237 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪159 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪346 .......................................................N-Log‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪292 ،72 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪16 ،15 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪115............................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪259 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪167 ،78 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪335 ،307...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪334 ،306................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‪243 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪333 ،329......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪245 ،146 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪385 ،141 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪163 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪293 ،39 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪240 ،182 ................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪383 ،376 ،368 .......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪350 ،184....................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﻴ ﺎ ‪155 ،121 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪119 ،111 ،52 ......... AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪157 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪124 ،106 ،60 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ‪293 ،39 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪40 ،38...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪447 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪244 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‪411 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪292 ،38 .....................................(Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪465‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ‪11 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ‪386 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪241 ،183 ،106 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪429 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪75.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪414...................... Camera Control Pro 2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91...................Creative Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪،91..Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪239 ،175‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪239 ،177 ،176 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ‪69 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪440 ،411 ،32 ،28...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪40 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪440 ،411 ،28‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪461 ،460 ،32 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪460 ............................................XQD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪155 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪154 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ ‪106 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪126 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪123 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪304 ،128...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪258 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪296 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪9 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪260 .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪385 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪327 ،133 ،50 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪68 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‪351 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪322 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪240 ،182 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪167 ،78 ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪264 ...........c‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‪323 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪463 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪83 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪251 .......................‬‬ ‫‪ 466‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪282 ،267 ،22 ........................ i‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪324 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪266 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪36 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪36 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪249 ،52 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪249 ،52 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪111 ،54 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪...‬‬ ‫‪111 ،54‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪119 ،111 ،55 ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪،111 ،55 ...‬‬ ‫‪119‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪119 ،111، 54 .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ‪253 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪8 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪119 ،111 ،59 ،53 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪166 ....................................... NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪261 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪237 ،163 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪265 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪196 .................................................... ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪193 ......................................................WB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪189 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪189‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪321 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪189 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪265 ،188......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪229 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪210 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑ ﹸﻌﺪ ‪360 ،347......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪235 ،65 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪262 ....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪322 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪255 ،79 ،71 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪181 ................................NR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪198 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪250 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪301 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪307 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪240 ،182 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪264 ،255 ،79 ............‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪354 ،187 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪283 ،269 ،24 ..............‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪306 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪319 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ‪240 ،183 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪241 ،187 ،110 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪241 ،118......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪105 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ‪243 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪383 ،378 ،370 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪96 ،62.................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91........(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪252 .................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪419 ،298 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪318 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪327 ،133 ،50 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪292 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪238 ،168 ،96 ،61 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪294 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪295 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪412 ،339 ،307 .......(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪334 ،306 ،107 ،40 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،102 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪237 ،114 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪75...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪164 ،104 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪237 ،114 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪164 ،104 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪252 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪153 ،138 ،51 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪138 ،51...............................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ‪139 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪139 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪77 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪238 ،167 ،77 .................................. ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪242 ،116 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.....‬‬ ‫‪289‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪292 ،72 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪136 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪309 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪302 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪445 ،59 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪254 ..AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪67........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪305 .(WR‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪303 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪153 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪259 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪255 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪170 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪171 ،98 ،63..................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪141......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪394 ،392...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ‪4 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪413 ،8 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪15.....................................................................DISP‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪24...................................................................... Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪24...................................................................... Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪45 ،41 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪86 ،17........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪18.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪281 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪44 ،43 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪46 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪288 ،277.....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪8 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪17..................................................................AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪24...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪137 ،125 ،12 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪268 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪262 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪96 ،62..................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪288 ....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪467‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪70 ،69.................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪167 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪279 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪259 ..................................CL‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪264 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪349 ،263............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪293 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪295 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪295 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪461 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪412 ،75.............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪243 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪439 ،28 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪396 ،10 ،6......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪290 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪57 ،10...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪3 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪28 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪91................................................ (Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪12.......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪117............................................................DX‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪293 ،40 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪297 ...........‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪239 ،175 ،91 ...... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪169 ،97 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪256 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪،99 ،96 ،63...‬‬ ‫‪173‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪96 ،62...‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪96 ،62........‬‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪437 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪96 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪ 468‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪463 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪250 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ‪429 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪444 ،36 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪298 ................... CPU‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪120 ،49 ،11 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪120 ،49 ،11 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪156 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪262 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪399 ،296 ،15..............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪262 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‪60 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪36 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪303 ،57 ،10 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪260 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪57 ،10................................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪69 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪96 ،62.....................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪412 ،36.............................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪413................................‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪75.........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪70......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ‪410......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪70.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪406 ،347 ،263 ،105 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪96 ،62....................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪357 ،350..............................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪358 ،351 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪409 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪265 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪406 .................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪96 ،62...................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪112 ،49 ،45.......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ‪221 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪......DCF‬‬ ‫‪443‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪291 ،150 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪312 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪152 ،141 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪236 ،144 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪158 ،141 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪329 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪68 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪279 ،17 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪17....................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪17..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ‪130 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪130 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪87 ،86......................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪87 ،86....................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪87 ،86.............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪87 ،86..............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪87 ،86............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪308 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪257 ......................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪409 ،355............................FV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪106 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪256 ،106.....................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91....... (Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪412..........................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪339 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪405 ،5..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪56 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪159 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪153 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪382 ،374 ،366...........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91.........(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪416 ،411 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪،411 ،29 .‬‬ ‫‪440 ،428‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪125 ،124 ،16 ،15 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪205 ........................(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ‪34 ................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪129 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ii ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪263 ................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪105 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪105 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪180 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪20 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪254 ،43 ........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪425 ،419 ،2...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪8 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪109 ،84 ،81..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪109 ،81 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‪109 ،82 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪109 ،81 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪303 ،50 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪447 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪34 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪243 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪344 ................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪415...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91.........(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪30 ،29..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪305 ...................................................... LED‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪315 ....................................... NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪106 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪154 ،121 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪114 ،82.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪308 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪122 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪441 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪382 ،357....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪123 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪402 ،8...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪38 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪9 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪327 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪293 ،39 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪293 ،39 ......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪237 ،164 ،163 ،117 ،104 ...........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪91................................................ (Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪453 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪95 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪410...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪59 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪469‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪71..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪59 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‪281 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪343 ......................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪416 ،411 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪445 .................................................... CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪304 ،258 ،44..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪257 ،109 ،84 ،82 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‪242 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪414 ،116..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪414 ،116....................................‬‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪250‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫)‪406 .............. Creative Lighting System (CLS‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪112.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪253 ،250 ،86........................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪237 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪91.......... (Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪94 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،362 ،305...‬‬ ‫‪413‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪109 ،81 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪241 ،187 ،119 ،111 ،52 ........‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‪363 ،305................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪306 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪352 ،186 ،105 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪260 ......................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪109 ،84 ،81............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪69 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪،111 ،54‬‬ ‫‪241 ،187 ،119‬‬ ‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪358 ،350 ،70 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪358 ،350...........................‬‬ ‫‪ 470‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪SB8K02(1X‬‬ ‫‪6MOA101X-02‬‬

Nikon Z 7 دليل مرجعي (التعليمات الكاملة)

Related manuals

Nikon

D5200

Nikon

D7500

Nikon

D5500

Nikon

D3300

Nikon

Z 50

Nikon

Nikon 1 S2

Nikon

Z 50

Nikon

D780

Nikon

D780

Nikon

D780

Nikon

D780